User manual

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsDigital CameraEX-MR1

.ﺍﺬﻫ

CASIO

ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟ ﻙءﺍﺮﺷ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻙﺮﻜﺸﻧ

•.ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ ﻲﻓ ﺓﺩﺭﺍﻮﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻃﺎﻴﺘﺣﻻﺍ ﺓءﺍﺮﻗ ﻦﻣ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﻞﺒﻗ ﻖﻘﺤﺗ

•.

ﻼﺒﻘﺘﺴﻣ ﻪﻴﻟﺇ ﻉﻮﺟﺮﻠﻟ ﻦﻣﺁ ﻥﺎﻜﻣ ﻲﻓ ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﺑ ﻆﻔﺘﺣﺍ

•ﻰﻠﻋ ﻲﻤﺳﺮﻟﺍ

EXILIM

ﻊﻗﻮﻣ ﺓﺭﺎﻳﺰﺑ ﻢﻗ ،ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻬﺑ ﺔﺻﺎﺨﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻣﻮﻠﻌﻤﻟﺍ ﺙﺪﺣﺃ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻉﻼﻃﻺﻟ

http://www.exilim.com/

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺭ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (126 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍءﻙ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ CASIO‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪EXILIM‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪http://www.exilim.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪(NP-80‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ*‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫)‪(AD-C53U‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪2.....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ! ‪3..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪8......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ‪9...................................................................
PAGE 5
‫❚❙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪47 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪) ..................................................................‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪49 .....‬‬ ‫❚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪) .................................................................‬ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪49......‬‬ ‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪) ...........................................................‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‪50......‬‬ ‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪) ..........
PAGE 6
‫❚❙ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪71 .....................................................‬‬ ‫❚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Link‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪72...........................................................‬‬ ‫❚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪72...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪) ...................‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‪74 .....
PAGE 7
‫❚❙ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫‪96‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪96 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪104 ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪110 ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫❚ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪110 ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫❚ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪110 ............
PAGE 8
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫‪12 3‬‬ ‫‪bk bl‬‬ ‫] [‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(28‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(46‬‬ ‫‪) [p] 3‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(26‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(19 ،17‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(24‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪[CARD USB‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(40‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 10
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(27‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(59‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(49 ،29‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ً‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (AE‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 11
‫‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪123 4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪bk‬‬ ‫‪bl‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(64‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(68‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(86‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(55‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(59‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫‪ bk‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(92‬‬ ‫‪ bl‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(21‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 12
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 14‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﺠﻮﻡ ﻭﻗﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺭﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 65‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 63‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 71‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪LED‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫‪LED‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫• ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 15
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ )‪ (NP-80‬ﻣﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺟﺰ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 18
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺳﺎﺧ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .
PAGE 19
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫)‪ .(2 ،1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﻮء ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫)ﺿﻮء‪/‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ(‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(110‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫)ﺿﻮء ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ”ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪) “(Language‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 23
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪93‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪92‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 24
‫*‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC‬ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ]‪.[CARD USB‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 25
‫•‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (23‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(61 ،31‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ART SHOT‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 36‬ﻭ ‪.38‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪ R‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.
PAGE 28
‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫]‪[6][4][2][8‬‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(121‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 29
‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺻﻮ ًﺗﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .
PAGE 30
‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫)ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫”ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (49‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 31
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.61‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(11‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(70‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [8‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 32
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”‪) “Ü‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 33
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”‪) “Ü‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ً‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻂء ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 35
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫]‪[6] [4] [2] [8‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ )‪(ART SHOT‬‬ ‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻇﻞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ ﻭﺷﺎﻋﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻓﺖ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﺼﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪.“ART SHOT‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ART SHOT‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،Make-up ،CS‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ ART SHOT‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ “ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ” ﻛﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 39
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪(LED) LED‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪“LED‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪LED‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(35‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(35‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ )ﺻﺎﻣﺖ(‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻭﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺤﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(35‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ )‪(Make-up‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Make-up‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Make-up‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”‪) “Make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(35‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[4‬‬ ‫ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ HD‬ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪HD‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺺ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪SR‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(121‬‬ ‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻀﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫– ﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 63‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ" ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (30‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(43‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(50‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ Make-up‬ﻭﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.
PAGE 50
‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫)ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪًﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ )‪.(AE‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) PF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﻲ(‪.
PAGE 51
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (27‬ﺃﻭ ‪) Make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (43‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ‪CS 3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺻﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﻼ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪) [6‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪EV‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫]‪[6]/[4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪) EV‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(57‬‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ*‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(41‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ ،(CS‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫”ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ‪ ...‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ “...‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ .
PAGE 55
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪14M‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٢٤٠x٤٣٢٠‬‬ ‫‪3M‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (69‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫)‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨‬‬ ‫"‪5"×3.5‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )» ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ((‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“ ‪3‬‬ ‫» ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﺍً ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍء ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (FHD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﻏﺎﺋﻤﺎً ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻳﺪﻭﻱ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪ .
PAGE 59
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO) ISO‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“ ‪ISO 3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻼ‬ ‫‪ISO 100‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺣﺎﺟﺐ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﻲء‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ISO 200‬‬ ‫‪ISO 400‬‬ ‫‪ISO 800‬‬ ‫‪ISO 1600‬‬ ‫‪ISO 3200‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ )ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻫﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪(.
PAGE 60
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“ ‪ 3‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Ï‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ Ì‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﻼ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 31‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫»‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫]‪[6] [4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [8‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ )ﺻﺎﻣﺖ(‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﻔﺎﺩﻯ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [SET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(63‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ m‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (89‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ‪٣:٤‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 66
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻻ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ›‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[MENU‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ً‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻧﺴﺦ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .
PAGE 71
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫)ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ EXILIM Link‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ( ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ١٥٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Link‬ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ Google Play (Android‬ﺃﻭ )‪ App Store (iOS‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ(‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Link‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Android‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ”‪.“EXILIM Link‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.EXILIM Link‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ”‪.“Google Play‬‬ ‫‪iPhone .‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ”‪.“EXILIM Link‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.EXILIM Link‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ”‪.“App Store‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫[ )‪.
PAGE 73
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪:Android‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.EXILIM Link‬‬ ‫‪3M‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 3M‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 3M‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ*‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ*‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 76
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ 3 DPOF‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .٩٩‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ٠٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫”ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.
PAGE 77
‫‪ .‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) DPOF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(75‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(91‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻀﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪(USB‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(83 ،79‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(85 ،82‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪،Windows 8.1‬‬ ‫‪،Windows 8‬‬ ‫‪،Windows 7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪،Windows 8.1‬‬ ‫‪،Windows 8‬‬ ‫‪،Windows 7‬‬ ‫‪ QuickTime 7‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ QuickTime 7‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.
PAGE 80
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐّﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.19‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 81
‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8 ،Windows 8.1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫”ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬ ‫“‬ ‫”‬ ‫“‬ ‫”‬ ‫‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪Vista ،Windows 7‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ ﺛﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪) “DCIM‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ QuickTime 7‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://www.apple.com/quicktime/‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 83
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ Macintosh‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫‪ ،iPhoto‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.Macintosh‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ OS X 10.
PAGE 84
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.19‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 85
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.87‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(87‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺄﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CIMG0001‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 87
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)‪.Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ‪ CASIO‬ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬ ‫– ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(63‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻛﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ :5 - 1‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٥‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫= ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫= ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(86‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .
PAGE 91
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﻜﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﺤﻠﻲ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(92‬‬ ‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪ ١:٢٥ ،٢٠١٦ ،‬ﻡ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫]‪[2] [8‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫]‪[6] [4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺪء ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ٢٠٠١‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.٢٠٤٩‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (90‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .
PAGE 93
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪Language 3‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪.“Language‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬ ‫ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‪ ٥ ،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ )ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻷﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.
PAGE 97
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء )ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.
PAGE 98
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ً .
PAGE 99
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ* ﻻﻧﺴﻜﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﻝ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 100
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ً .‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 101
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺩﺣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﺩﺣﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﻠﺲ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 102
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘًﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘًﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 103
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻋﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻔﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 105
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺰﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻳﺮ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 106
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٢٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.
PAGE 107
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻯ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .
PAGE 108
iPerf (BSD License) Copyright (c) The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois All Rights Reserved. Iperf performance test Mark Gates Ajay Tirumala Jim Ferguson Jon Dugan Feng Qin Kevin Gibbs John Estabrook National Laboratory for Applied Network Research National Center for Supercomputing Applications University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign http://www.ncsa.uiuc.
PAGE 109
inet_ntop, inet_pton ISC License (ISC) [OSI Approved License] Copyright (c) 4-digit year, Company or Person's Name Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS.
PAGE 110
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ً .
PAGE 111
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٢٤٠‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ٦٠/٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺼﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪ .
PAGE 112
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(95‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ )–( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 113
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪3M‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ WLAN‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ –‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/ 1‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/ 1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/ 1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/ 1‬‬ ‫= ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪/ ...////‬‬ ‫= ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪PLAY‬‬ ‫‪...
PAGE 114
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(16‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(17‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪ CASIO NP-80‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.
PAGE 115
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء‪ (١ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(17‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ“ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .
PAGE 116
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻟﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ EV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪) +‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻨًﺎ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(68‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 118
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(93 ،22‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(95‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .
PAGE 119
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ALERT‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(95‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‬ ‫‪*microSD‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪(٣٢٤٠x٤٣٢٠) 14M‬‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٢٤‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪٤٧٩٨‬‬ ‫‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨) 3M‬‬ ‫‪ ٨٢٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪٣٤‬‬ ‫‪١٨٩٦٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪*mi
PAGE 122
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ Exif) JPEG‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(2.3‬؛ ‪ DCF 2.0‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ؛ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،MOV‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،H.
PAGE 123
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫* ‪F5.0‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 125
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪(NP-80‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ ٧٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪) ٣١٫٤‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٣٩٫٥ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ٥٫٩ x‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ ١٥‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 126
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.